Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 29347:159b22213a00
*** empty log message ***
author | Dave Love <fx@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Wed, 31 May 2000 23:02:45 +0000 |
parents | 5ccfe8a1638f |
children | 979a75b2755b |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
103 | |
104 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
105 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
106 | |
107 struct dim | |
108 { | |
109 int width; | |
110 int height; | |
111 }; | |
112 | |
113 | |
114 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
115 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
116 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
117 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 118 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
119 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
120 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
121 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
122 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
123 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
124 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
125 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
126 struct dim)); | |
127 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
128 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
129 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
130 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
131 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
132 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
133 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 134 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
135 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
136 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
137 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
138 struct window *)); | |
139 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
140 struct window *)); | |
141 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
142 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
143 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
144 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
145 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
146 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
147 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
148 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
149 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
150 int, int)); | |
151 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
152 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
153 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
154 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 155 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
156 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 157 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
158 int)); | |
159 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
160 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
161 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 162 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
163 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
164 #endif |
25012 | 165 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
166 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
167 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
168 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
169 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
170 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
171 struct glyph_row *)); | |
172 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
173 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
174 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
175 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
176 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
177 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 178 |
179 | |
180 | |
181 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
182 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
183 scrolling. */ | |
184 | |
185 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
186 |
554 | 187 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 188 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 189 |
764 | 190 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 191 |
25012 | 192 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 193 |
194 int display_completed; | |
195 | |
25012 | 196 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
197 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 198 |
199 int visible_bell; | |
200 | |
764 | 201 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 202 |
203 int inverse_video; | |
204 | |
205 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
206 | |
207 int baud_rate; | |
208 | |
25012 | 209 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
210 is running. */ | |
314 | 211 |
212 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
213 | |
214 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 215 |
314 | 216 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
217 | |
25012 | 218 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
219 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 220 |
221 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 222 as a character code. |
223 | |
224 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
225 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 226 |
227 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
228 | |
229 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
230 | |
231 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
232 | |
25012 | 233 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
234 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
235 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
236 | |
314 | 237 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
238 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
239 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 240 |
314 | 241 |
25012 | 242 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
243 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
244 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
245 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 246 |
247 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 248 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 249 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
250 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 251 |
252 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
253 | |
254 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
255 | |
256 FILE *termscript; | |
257 | |
258 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
259 | |
260 struct cm Wcm; | |
261 | |
262 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
263 | |
264 int delayed_size_change; | |
265 | |
266 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
267 | |
268 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
269 | |
270 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
271 | |
272 struct window *updated_window; | |
273 | |
274 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
275 | |
276 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
277 int updated_area; | |
278 | |
279 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
280 | |
281 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
282 | |
283 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
284 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
285 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
286 | |
287 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
288 | |
289 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
290 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
291 | |
292 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
293 int glyph_pool_count; | |
294 | |
295 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
296 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
297 | |
298 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
299 | |
300 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
301 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
302 | |
303 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
304 | |
305 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
306 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
307 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
308 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
309 loaded on demand. */ | |
310 | |
311 int fonts_changed_p; | |
312 | |
313 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
314 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
315 | |
316 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
317 | |
318 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
319 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
320 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
321 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
322 | |
323 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
324 | |
325 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
326 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
327 | |
328 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
329 | |
330 | |
331 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
332 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
333 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 334 |
335 void | |
336 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
337 char *from, *to; | |
338 int size; | |
339 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
340 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 341 return; |
342 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
344 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
346 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
347 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 else |
314 | 351 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 354 |
355 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
356 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
357 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
358 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
359 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
360 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 361 if (to - from < 64) |
362 { | |
363 do | |
364 *--endt = *--endf; | |
365 while (endf != from); | |
366 } | |
367 else | |
368 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
369 for (;;) |
314 | 370 { |
371 endt -= (to - from); | |
372 endf -= (to - from); | |
373 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
374 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
375 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
376 |
314 | 377 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
378 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
379 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
380 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 381 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
382 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 383 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
384 } | |
385 } | |
386 } | |
387 | |
25012 | 388 |
389 | |
390 /*********************************************************************** | |
391 Glyph Matrices | |
392 ***********************************************************************/ | |
393 | |
394 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
395 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
396 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
397 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
398 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
399 | |
400 struct glyph_matrix * | |
401 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
402 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
403 { | |
404 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
405 | |
406 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
407 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
408 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
409 | |
410 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
411 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
412 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
413 | |
414 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
415 result->pool = pool; | |
416 return result; | |
417 } | |
418 | |
419 | |
420 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
421 | |
422 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
423 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
424 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
425 pointer was passed to this function. | |
426 | |
427 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
428 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
429 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
430 | |
431 static void | |
432 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
433 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
434 { | |
435 if (matrix) | |
436 { | |
437 int i; | |
438 | |
439 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
440 allocated. */ | |
441 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
442 abort (); | |
443 | |
444 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
445 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
446 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
447 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
448 | |
449 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
450 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
451 xfree (matrix); | |
452 } | |
453 } | |
454 | |
455 | |
456 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
457 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
458 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
459 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
460 or a float. */ | |
461 | |
462 static int | |
463 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
464 struct window *w; | |
465 int total_glyphs; | |
466 Lisp_Object margin; | |
467 { | |
468 int n; | |
469 | |
470 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
471 { | |
472 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
473 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
474 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
475 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
476 } | |
477 else | |
478 n = 0; | |
479 | |
480 return n; | |
481 } | |
482 | |
483 | |
484 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
485 window sizes. | |
486 | |
487 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
488 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
489 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
490 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
491 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
492 | |
493 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
494 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
495 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
496 MATRIX->pool. | |
497 | |
498 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
499 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
500 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
501 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
502 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
503 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
504 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
505 | |
506 static void | |
507 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
508 struct window *w; | |
509 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
510 int x, y; | |
511 struct dim dim; | |
512 { | |
513 int i; | |
514 int new_rows; | |
515 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 516 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
517 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 518 int left = -1, right = -1; |
519 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
520 | |
521 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
522 if (w) | |
523 { | |
25546 | 524 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
525 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 526 } |
25546 | 527 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 528 |
529 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
530 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
531 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
532 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
533 { | |
534 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
535 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
536 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
537 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
538 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
539 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
540 | |
541 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
542 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 543 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 544 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
545 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
546 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
547 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
548 return; | |
549 } | |
550 | |
551 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
552 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
553 { | |
554 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
555 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
556 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
557 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
558 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
559 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
560 } | |
561 else | |
562 new_rows = 0; | |
563 | |
564 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
565 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
566 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
567 if (matrix->pool) | |
568 { | |
569 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
570 | |
571 if (w) | |
572 { | |
573 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
574 w->left_margin_width); | |
575 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
576 w->right_margin_width); | |
577 } | |
578 else | |
579 left = right = 0; | |
580 | |
581 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
582 { | |
583 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
584 | |
585 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
586 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
587 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
588 + x); | |
589 | |
590 if (w == NULL | |
591 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 592 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 593 { |
594 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
595 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
596 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
597 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
598 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
599 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
600 } | |
601 else | |
602 { | |
603 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
604 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
605 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
606 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
607 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
608 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
609 } | |
610 } | |
611 | |
612 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
613 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
614 } | |
615 else | |
616 { | |
617 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
618 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
619 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
620 || new_rows | |
25546 | 621 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 622 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
623 { | |
624 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
625 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
626 | |
627 while (row < end) | |
628 { | |
629 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
630 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
631 (dim.width | |
632 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
633 | |
634 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
635 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 636 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 637 { |
638 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
639 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
640 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
641 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
642 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
643 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
644 } | |
645 else | |
646 { | |
647 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
648 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
649 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
650 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
651 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
652 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
653 } | |
654 ++row; | |
655 } | |
656 } | |
657 | |
658 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
659 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
660 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
661 } | |
662 | |
663 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
664 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
665 | |
666 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
667 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
668 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
669 when this function runs. */ | |
670 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
671 { | |
672 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
673 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
674 of the window. */ | |
675 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
676 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
677 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
678 { | |
679 i = 0; | |
680 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
681 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
682 < matrix->window_height)) | |
683 ++i; | |
684 | |
685 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
686 are invalidated. */ | |
687 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
688 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
689 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
690 | |
691 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
692 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
693 } | |
694 else | |
695 { | |
696 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
697 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
698 } | |
699 } | |
700 | |
701 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
702 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
703 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
704 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
705 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
706 | |
707 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
708 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
709 if (w) | |
710 { | |
711 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
712 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
713 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
714 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
715 } | |
716 } | |
717 | |
718 | |
719 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
720 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
721 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
722 below). */ | |
314 | 723 |
724 static void | |
25012 | 725 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
726 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
727 int start, end; | |
314 | 728 { |
25012 | 729 int i, j; |
730 | |
731 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
732 { | |
733 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
734 initialization. */ | |
735 struct glyph_row temp; | |
736 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
737 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
738 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
739 } | |
314 | 740 } |
741 | |
25012 | 742 |
743 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
744 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
745 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
746 row structures are moved around). | |
747 | |
748 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
749 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
750 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
751 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
752 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
753 rotating right. */ | |
754 | |
755 void | |
756 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
757 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
758 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 759 { |
25012 | 760 if (by < 0) |
761 { | |
762 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
763 by = -by; | |
764 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
765 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
766 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
767 } | |
768 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 769 { |
25012 | 770 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
771 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
772 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
773 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 774 } |
25012 | 775 } |
776 | |
777 | |
778 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
779 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
780 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
781 | |
782 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
783 increment_matrix_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 784 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; |
785 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
786 { | |
787 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
788 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
789 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
790 xassert (start <= end); | |
791 | |
792 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
793 increment_row_positions (matrix->rows + start, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 794 } |
795 | |
796 | |
797 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
798 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
799 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
800 | |
801 void | |
802 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
803 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
804 int start, end; | |
805 int enabled_p; | |
806 { | |
807 xassert (start <= end); | |
808 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
809 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
810 | |
811 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
812 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
813 } | |
814 | |
815 | |
816 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
817 | |
818 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
819 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
820 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
821 enabled_p flag. | |
822 | |
823 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
824 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
825 | |
826 void | |
827 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
828 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
829 { | |
830 if (matrix) | |
314 | 831 { |
25012 | 832 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
833 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 834 } |
835 } | |
25012 | 836 |
837 | |
838 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
839 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
840 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
841 | |
842 void | |
843 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
844 struct window *w; | |
845 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
846 int start, end, dy; | |
847 { | |
848 int min_y, max_y; | |
849 | |
850 xassert (start <= end); | |
851 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
852 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
853 | |
25546 | 854 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 855 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
856 | |
857 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
858 { | |
859 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
860 | |
861 row->y += dy; | |
862 | |
863 if (row->y < min_y) | |
864 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
865 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
866 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
867 else | |
868 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
869 } | |
870 } | |
871 | |
872 | |
873 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
874 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
875 current matrix. */ | |
876 | |
877 void | |
878 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
879 register struct frame *f; | |
880 { | |
881 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
882 if (f->current_matrix) | |
883 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
884 | |
885 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
886 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
887 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
888 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
889 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
890 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
891 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
892 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
893 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 894 |
895 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
896 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
897 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
898 } | |
899 | |
900 | |
901 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 902 |
21514 | 903 void |
25012 | 904 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
905 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 906 { |
25012 | 907 if (f->desired_matrix) |
908 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
909 | |
910 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
911 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
912 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
913 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
914 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 915 |
916 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
917 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
918 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
919 } | |
920 | |
921 | |
922 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
923 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
924 | |
925 static void | |
926 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
927 struct window *w; | |
928 int desired_p; | |
929 { | |
930 while (w) | |
314 | 931 { |
25012 | 932 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
933 { | |
934 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
935 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
936 } | |
937 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 938 { |
25012 | 939 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
940 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
941 } | |
942 else | |
943 { | |
944 if (desired_p) | |
945 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
946 else | |
314 | 947 { |
25012 | 948 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
949 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 950 } |
25012 | 951 } |
952 | |
953 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
954 } | |
955 } | |
956 | |
957 | |
958 | |
959 /*********************************************************************** | |
960 Glyph Rows | |
961 | |
962 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
963 ***********************************************************************/ | |
964 | |
965 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
966 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
967 structure members. */ | |
968 | |
969 void | |
970 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
971 struct glyph_row *row; | |
972 { | |
973 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
974 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
975 | |
976 /* Save pointers. */ | |
977 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
978 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
979 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
980 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
981 | |
982 /* Clear. */ | |
983 *row = null_row; | |
984 | |
985 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
986 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
987 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
988 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
989 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
990 } | |
991 | |
992 | |
993 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
994 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
995 | |
996 void | |
997 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
998 struct window *w; | |
999 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1000 int y; | |
1001 { | |
1002 int min_y, max_y; | |
1003 | |
25546 | 1004 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1005 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1006 | |
1007 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1008 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1009 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1010 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1011 |
1012 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1013 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1014 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1015 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1016 else | |
1017 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1018 | |
1019 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1020 } | |
1021 | |
1022 | |
1023 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1024 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1025 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1026 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1027 ends. */ | |
1028 | |
1029 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1030 increment_row_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 1031 struct glyph_row *row; |
1032 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1033 { | |
1034 int area, i; | |
1035 | |
1036 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1037 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1038 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1039 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1040 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1041 | |
1042 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1043 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1044 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1045 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1046 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1047 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1048 | |
1049 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1050 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1051 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1052 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1053 } | |
1054 | |
1055 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1056 #if 0 |
25012 | 1057 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph |
1058 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1059 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1060 | |
1061 static void | |
1062 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1063 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1064 { | |
1065 int area; | |
1066 | |
1067 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1068 { | |
1069 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1070 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1071 | |
1072 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1073 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1074 | |
1075 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1076 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1077 | |
1078 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1079 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1080 | |
1081 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1082 { | |
1083 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1084 initialization. */ | |
1085 struct glyph temp; | |
1086 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1087 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1088 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1089 ++glyph_a; | |
1090 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1091 } |
1092 } | |
1093 } | |
25012 | 1094 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1095 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1096 |
1097 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1098 | |
1099 static INLINE void | |
1100 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1101 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1102 { | |
1103 int i; | |
1104 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1105 { | |
1106 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1107 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1108 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1109 } | |
1110 } | |
1111 | |
1112 | |
1113 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1114 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1115 | |
1116 INLINE void | |
1117 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1118 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1119 { | |
1120 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1121 | |
1122 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1123 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1124 | |
1125 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1126 *to = *from; | |
1127 | |
1128 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1129 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1130 } | |
1131 | |
1132 | |
1133 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1134 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1135 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1136 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1137 | |
1138 void | |
1139 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1140 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1141 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1142 { | |
1143 int area; | |
1144 | |
1145 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1146 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1147 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1148 | |
1149 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1150 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1151 if (from->used[area]) | |
1152 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1153 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1154 | |
1155 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1156 increment_row_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 1157 } |
1158 | |
1159 | |
1160 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1161 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1162 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1163 a memory leak. */ | |
1164 | |
1165 static INLINE void | |
1166 assign_row (to, from) | |
1167 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1168 { | |
1169 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1170 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1171 } | |
1172 | |
1173 | |
1174 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1175 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1176 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1177 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1178 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1179 | |
1180 static int | |
1181 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1182 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1183 { | |
1184 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1185 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1186 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1187 | |
1188 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1189 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1190 } | |
1191 | |
1192 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1193 #if 0 |
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1194 |
25012 | 1195 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice |
1196 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1197 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1198 | |
1199 static struct glyph_row * | |
1200 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1201 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1202 int row; | |
1203 { | |
1204 int i; | |
1205 | |
1206 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1207 | |
1208 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1209 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1210 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1211 break; | |
1212 | |
1213 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1214 } | |
1215 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1216 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1217 |
1218 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1219 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1220 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1221 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1222 | |
1223 void | |
1224 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1225 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1226 { | |
1227 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1228 { | |
1229 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1230 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1231 } | |
1232 } | |
1233 | |
1234 | |
1235 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1236 | |
1237 int | |
1238 line_hash_code (row) | |
1239 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1240 { | |
1241 int hash = 0; | |
1242 | |
1243 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1244 { | |
1245 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1246 { | |
1247 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1248 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1249 hash = -1; | |
1250 } | |
1251 else | |
1252 { | |
1253 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1254 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1255 | |
1256 while (glyph < end) | |
1257 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1258 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1259 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1260 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1261 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1262 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1263 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1264 ++glyph; |
1265 } | |
1266 | |
1267 if (hash == 0) | |
1268 hash = 1; | |
1269 } | |
1270 } | |
1271 | |
1272 return hash; | |
1273 } | |
1274 | |
1275 | |
1276 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1277 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1278 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1279 | |
1280 static unsigned int | |
1281 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1282 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1283 int vpos; | |
1284 { | |
1285 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1286 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1287 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1288 int len; | |
1289 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1290 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1291 | |
1292 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1293 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1294 { | |
1295 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1296 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1297 --end; | |
1298 | |
1299 /* All blank line. */ | |
1300 if (end == beg) | |
1301 return 0; | |
1302 | |
1303 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1304 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1305 ++beg; | |
1306 } | |
1307 | |
1308 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1309 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1310 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1311 len = end - beg; | |
1312 else | |
1313 { | |
1314 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1315 in LEN. */ | |
1316 len = 0; | |
1317 while (beg < end) | |
1318 { | |
1319 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1320 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1321 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1322 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1323 len += 1; |
1324 else | |
1325 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1326 | |
1327 ++beg; | |
1328 } | |
1329 } | |
1330 | |
1331 return len; | |
1332 } | |
1333 | |
1334 | |
1335 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1336 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1337 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
1338 visibility. */ | |
1339 | |
1340 static INLINE int | |
1341 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
1342 struct window *w; | |
1343 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1344 { | |
1345 if (a == b) | |
1346 return 1; | |
1347 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1348 return 0; | |
1349 else | |
1350 { | |
1351 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1352 int area; | |
1353 | |
1354 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
1355 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1356 { | |
1357 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1358 return 0; | |
1359 | |
1360 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1361 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1362 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1363 | |
1364 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1365 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1366 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1367 | |
1368 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1369 return 0; | |
1370 } | |
1371 | |
1372 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1373 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1374 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1375 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1376 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1377 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1378 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1379 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1380 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1381 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1382 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1383 || a->x != b->x | |
1384 /* Different height. */ | |
1385 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1386 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1387 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1388 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1389 return 0; | |
1390 } | |
1391 | |
1392 return 1; | |
1393 } | |
1394 | |
1395 | |
314 | 1396 |
25012 | 1397 /*********************************************************************** |
1398 Glyph Pool | |
1399 | |
1400 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1401 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1402 | |
1403 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1404 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1405 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1406 | |
1407 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1408 new_glyph_pool () | |
1409 { | |
1410 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1411 | |
1412 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1413 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1414 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1415 | |
1416 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1417 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1418 | |
1419 return result; | |
1420 } | |
1421 | |
1422 | |
1423 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1424 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1425 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1426 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1427 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1428 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1429 | |
1430 static void | |
1431 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1432 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1433 { | |
1434 if (pool) | |
1435 { | |
1436 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1437 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1438 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1439 | |
1440 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1441 xfree (pool); | |
1442 } | |
1443 } | |
1444 | |
1445 | |
1446 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1447 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1448 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1449 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1450 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1451 | |
1452 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1453 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1454 | |
1455 static int | |
1456 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1457 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1458 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1459 { | |
1460 int needed; | |
1461 int changed_p; | |
1462 | |
1463 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1464 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1465 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1466 | |
1467 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1468 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1469 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1470 { | |
1471 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1472 | |
1473 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1474 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1475 else | |
1476 { | |
1477 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1478 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1479 } | |
1480 | |
1481 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1482 } | |
1483 | |
1484 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1485 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1486 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1487 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1488 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1489 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1490 | |
1491 return changed_p; | |
1492 } | |
1493 | |
1494 | |
1495 | |
1496 /*********************************************************************** | |
1497 Debug Code | |
1498 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1499 | |
1500 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1501 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1502 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1503 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1504 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1505 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1506 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1507 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1508 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1509 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1510 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1511 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1512 |
25012 | 1513 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1514 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1515 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1516 MATRIX. */ | |
1517 | |
1518 void | |
1519 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1520 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1521 { | |
1522 int i, j; | |
1523 | |
1524 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1525 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1526 xassert (i == j | |
1527 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1528 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1529 } | |
1530 | |
1531 | |
1532 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1533 | |
1534 struct glyph_row * | |
1535 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1536 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1537 int row; | |
1538 { | |
1539 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1540 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1541 | |
1542 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1543 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1544 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1545 #if 0 |
25012 | 1546 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1547 #endif | |
1548 | |
1549 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1550 } | |
1551 | |
1552 | |
1553 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1554 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1555 nevertheless. */ | |
1556 | |
1557 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1558 window W. */ | |
1559 | |
1560 static void | |
1561 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1562 struct window *w; |
1563 { | |
25012 | 1564 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1565 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1566 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1567 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1568 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1569 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1570 int c; | |
1571 | |
1572 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1573 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1574 return; | |
1575 | |
1576 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1577 | |
1578 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1579 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1580 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1581 { | |
1582 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1583 | |
1584 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1585 last_text_row = row; | |
1586 | |
1587 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1588 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1589 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1590 | |
1591 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1592 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1593 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1594 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1595 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1596 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1597 | |
1598 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1599 of next row. */ | |
1600 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1601 { | |
1602 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1603 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1604 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1605 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1606 } | |
1607 row = next; | |
1608 } | |
1609 | |
1610 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1611 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1612 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1613 } | |
1614 | |
1615 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1616 | |
1617 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1618 | |
1619 | |
1620 | |
1621 /********************************************************************** | |
1622 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1623 **********************************************************************/ | |
1624 | |
1625 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1626 redisplay | |
1627 | |
1628 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1629 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1630 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1631 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1632 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1633 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1634 performed. | |
1635 | |
1636 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1637 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1638 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1639 | |
1640 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1641 | |
1642 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1643 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1644 | |
1645 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1646 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1647 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1648 | |
1649 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1650 function. | |
1651 | |
1652 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1653 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1654 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1655 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1656 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1657 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1658 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1659 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1660 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1661 | |
1662 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1663 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1664 necessary. | |
1665 | |
1666 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1667 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1668 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1669 windows in the sequence. | |
1670 | |
1671 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1672 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1673 | | | | | | |
1674 | | | | | |
1675 +---------+ | | result height | |
1676 | +---------+ | |
1677 | | | | |
1678 +----------+ --- | |
1679 | |
1680 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1681 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1682 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1683 | |
1684 |<---- result width -->| | |
1685 +---------+ --- | |
1686 | | | | |
1687 | | | | |
1688 +---------+--+ | | |
1689 | | | | |
1690 | | result height | |
1691 | | | |
1692 +------------+---------+ | | |
1693 | | | | |
1694 | | | | |
1695 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1696 | |
1697 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1698 allocated. */ | |
1699 | |
1700 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1701 | |
1702 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1703 size. */ | |
1704 | |
1705 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1706 | |
1707 static struct dim | |
1708 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1709 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1710 Lisp_Object window; | |
1711 int x, y; | |
1712 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1713 int dim_only_p; | |
1714 int *window_change_flags; | |
1715 { | |
1716 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1717 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1718 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1719 struct dim total; | |
1720 struct dim dim; | |
1721 struct window *w; | |
1722 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1723 | |
1724 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1725 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1726 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1727 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1728 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1729 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1730 in_horz_combination_p | |
1731 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1732 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1733 | |
1734 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1735 do | |
1736 { | |
1737 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1738 | |
1739 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1740 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1741 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1742 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1743 dim_only_p, | |
1744 window_change_flags); | |
1745 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1746 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1747 dim_only_p, | |
1748 window_change_flags); | |
1749 else | |
1750 { | |
1751 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1752 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1753 { | |
1754 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1755 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1756 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1757 } | |
1758 | |
1759 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1760 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1761 dim.width = XINT (w->width); |
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1762 dim.height = XINT (w->height); |
25012 | 1763 |
1764 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1765 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1766 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1767 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1768 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1769 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1770 w->right_margin_width) | |
1771 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1772 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1773 w->left_margin_width) | |
1774 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1775 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1776 | |
1777 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1778 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1779 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1780 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1781 necessary. */ | |
1782 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1783 { | |
1784 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1785 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1786 } | |
1787 } | |
1788 | |
1789 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1790 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1791 below W. */ | |
1792 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1793 x += dim.width; | |
1794 else | |
1795 y += dim.height; | |
1796 | |
1797 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1798 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1799 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1800 | |
1801 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1802 window = w->next; | |
1803 } | |
1804 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1805 | |
1806 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1807 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1808 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1809 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1810 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1811 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1812 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1813 { | |
1814 total.width = x - x0; | |
1815 total.height = hmax; | |
1816 } | |
1817 else | |
1818 { | |
1819 total.width = wmax; | |
1820 total.height = y - y0; | |
1821 } | |
1822 | |
1823 return total; | |
1824 } | |
1825 | |
1826 | |
1827 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1828 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1829 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1830 | |
1831 static void | |
1832 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1833 struct window *w; | |
1834 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1835 { | |
1836 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1837 | |
1838 while (w) | |
314 | 1839 { |
25012 | 1840 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1841 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1842 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1843 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1844 else | |
314 | 1845 { |
25012 | 1846 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1847 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1848 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1849 struct dim dim; | |
1850 | |
1851 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1852 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1853 { |
25012 | 1854 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1855 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1856 } |
25012 | 1857 |
1858 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1859 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1860 / ch_dim.width) | |
1861 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1862 + 2 | |
1863 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1864 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1865 + 1 + 1); | |
1866 | |
1867 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1868 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1869 / ch_dim.height) | |
1870 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1871 bottom of the window. */ | |
1872 + 2 | |
1873 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1874 + 2); | |
1875 | |
1876 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1877 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1878 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1879 } | |
1880 | |
1881 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1882 } | |
1883 } | |
1884 | |
1885 | |
1886 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1887 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1888 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1889 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1890 | |
1891 void | |
1892 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1893 struct frame *f; | |
1894 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1895 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1896 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1897 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1898 |
25012 | 1899 if (f) |
1900 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1901 else | |
1902 { | |
1903 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1904 | |
1905 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1906 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1907 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1908 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1909 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1910 } |
1911 | |
1912 | |
1913 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1914 | |
1915 To be called from init_display. | |
1916 | |
1917 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1918 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1919 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1920 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1921 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1922 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1923 | |
1924 static void | |
1925 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1926 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1927 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1928 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1929 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1930 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1931 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1932 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1933 |
1934 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1935 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1936 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1937 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1938 |
1939 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1940 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1941 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1942 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1943 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1944 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1945 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1946 } | |
1947 | |
1948 | |
1949 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1950 | |
1951 static void | |
1952 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1953 struct frame *f; | |
1954 { | |
1955 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1956 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1957 else | |
1958 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1959 | |
1960 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1961 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1962 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1963 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1964 | |
1965 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1966 } | |
1967 | |
1968 | |
1969 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1970 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1971 | |
1972 static void | |
1973 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1974 struct frame *f; | |
1975 { | |
1976 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1977 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1978 int pool_changed_p; | |
1979 int window_change_flags; | |
1980 int top_window_y; | |
1981 | |
1982 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
1983 return; | |
1984 | |
1985 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
1986 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
1987 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
1988 | |
1989 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
1990 | |
1991 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
1992 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
1993 { | |
1994 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1995 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1996 } | |
1997 | |
1998 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
1999 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
2000 { | |
2001 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2002 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2003 } | |
2004 | |
2005 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2006 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2007 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2008 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2009 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2010 matrix. */ | |
2011 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2012 matrix_dim | |
2013 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2014 0, top_window_y, | |
2015 ch_dim, 1, | |
2016 &window_change_flags); | |
2017 | |
2018 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2019 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2020 | |
2021 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2022 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2023 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2024 | |
2025 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2026 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2027 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2028 { | |
2029 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2030 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2031 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2032 &window_change_flags); | |
2033 | |
2034 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2035 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2036 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2037 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2038 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2039 | |
2040 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2041 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2042 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2043 | |
2044 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2045 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2046 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2047 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2048 } | |
2049 } | |
2050 | |
2051 | |
2052 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2053 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2054 | |
2055 static void | |
2056 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2057 struct frame *f; | |
2058 { | |
2059 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2060 struct window *w; | |
2061 | |
2062 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2063 | |
2064 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2065 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2066 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2067 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2068 #else | |
2069 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2070 #endif | |
2071 | |
2072 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2073 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2074 ch_dim); | |
2075 | |
2076 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2077 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2078 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2079 { | |
2080 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2081 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2082 { | |
2083 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2084 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2085 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2086 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2087 } | |
2088 else | |
2089 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2090 | |
2091 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2092 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2093 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2094 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2095 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2096 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2097 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2098 } | |
2099 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2100 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2101 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2102 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2103 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2104 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2105 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2106 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2107 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2108 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2109 } | |
2110 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2111 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2112 |
2113 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2114 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2115 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2116 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2117 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2118 } | |
2119 | |
2120 | |
2121 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2122 | |
2123 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2124 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2125 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2126 | |
2127 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2128 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2129 | |
2130 static void | |
2131 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2132 struct frame *f; | |
2133 { | |
2134 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2135 | |
2136 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2137 { | |
2138 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2139 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2140 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2141 } | |
2142 else | |
2143 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2144 } | |
2145 | |
2146 | |
2147 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2148 | |
2149 static void | |
2150 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2151 struct frame *f; | |
2152 { | |
2153 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2154 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2155 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2156 } | |
2157 | |
2158 | |
2159 | |
2160 /********************************************************************** | |
2161 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2162 **********************************************************************/ | |
2163 | |
2164 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2165 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2166 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2167 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2168 | |
2169 void | |
2170 free_glyphs (f) | |
2171 struct frame *f; | |
2172 { | |
2173 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2174 { | |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2175 /* Block interrupt input so that we don't get surprised by an X |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2176 event while we're in an inconsistent state. */ |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2177 BLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 2178 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; |
2179 | |
2180 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2181 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2182 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2183 | |
2184 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2185 glyph matrices. */ | |
2186 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2187 { | |
2188 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2189 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2190 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2191 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2192 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2193 } | |
2194 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2195 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2196 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2197 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2198 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2199 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2200 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2201 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2202 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2203 } |
2204 | |
2205 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2206 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2207 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2208 { | |
2209 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2210 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2211 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2212 } | |
2213 | |
2214 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2215 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2216 { | |
2217 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2218 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2219 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2220 } |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2221 |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2222 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
314 | 2223 } |
2224 } | |
2225 | |
25012 | 2226 |
2227 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2228 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2229 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2230 | |
2231 void | |
2232 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2233 struct window *w; | |
2234 { | |
2235 while (w) | |
2236 { | |
2237 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2238 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2239 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2240 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2241 else | |
2242 { | |
2243 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2244 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2245 W. */ | |
2246 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2247 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2248 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2249 } | |
2250 | |
2251 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2252 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2253 } | |
2254 } | |
2255 | |
2256 | |
2257 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2258 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2259 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2260 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2261 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2262 void |
25012 | 2263 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2264 { |
25012 | 2265 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2266 | |
2267 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2268 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2269 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2270 | |
2271 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2272 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2273 abort (); | |
2274 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2275 abort (); | |
2276 } | |
2277 | |
2278 | |
2279 | |
2280 /********************************************************************** | |
2281 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2282 **********************************************************************/ | |
2283 | |
2284 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2285 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2286 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2287 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2288 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2289 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2290 window matrices in this section. | |
2291 | |
2292 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2293 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2294 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2295 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2296 | |
2297 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2298 | desired | desired | | |
2299 | | | | |
2300 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2301 | current | | |
2302 | | | |
2303 +----------------------------------+ | |
2304 | |
2305 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2306 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2307 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2308 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2309 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2310 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2311 | |
2312 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2313 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2314 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2315 enabled. | |
2316 | |
2317 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2318 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2319 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2320 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2321 | |
2322 This problem is solved like this: | |
2323 | |
2324 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2325 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2326 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2327 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2328 automatically. | |
2329 | |
2330 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2331 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2332 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2333 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2334 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2335 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2336 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2337 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2338 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2339 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2340 | |
2341 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2342 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2343 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2344 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2345 | |
2346 static void | |
2347 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2348 struct frame *f; | |
2349 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2350 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2351 |
25012 | 2352 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2353 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2354 | |
2355 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2356 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2357 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2358 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2359 | |
2360 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2361 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2362 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2363 } | |
2364 | |
2365 | |
2366 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2367 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2368 | |
2369 static void | |
2370 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2371 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2372 struct window *w; | |
2373 { | |
2374 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2375 { |
25012 | 2376 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2377 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2378 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2379 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2380 else | |
2381 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2382 | |
2383 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2384 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2385 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2386 |
25012 | 2387 |
2388 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2389 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2390 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2391 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2392 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2393 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2394 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2395 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2396 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2397 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2398 | |
2399 static void | |
2400 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2401 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2402 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2403 { |
25012 | 2404 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2405 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2406 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2407 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2408 | |
2409 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2410 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2411 { | |
2412 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2413 | |
2414 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2415 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2416 { | |
2417 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2418 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2419 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2420 : '|'); | |
2421 } | |
2422 } | |
2423 else | |
2424 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2425 | |
2426 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2427 frame matrix. */ | |
2428 window_y = 0; | |
2429 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2430 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2431 { |
25012 | 2432 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2433 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2434 | |
2435 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2436 window row. */ | |
2437 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2438 | |
2439 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2440 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2441 | |
2442 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2443 { |
25012 | 2444 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2445 row to frame row. */ | |
2446 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2447 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2448 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2449 } | |
2450 else | |
2451 { | |
2452 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2453 | |
2454 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2455 windows. */ | |
2456 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2457 { | |
2458 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2459 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2460 } | |
2461 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2462 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2463 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2464 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2465 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2466 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2467 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2468 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2469 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2470 { |
25012 | 2471 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2472 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2473 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2474 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2475 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2476 | |
2477 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2478 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2479 | |
2480 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2481 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2482 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2483 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2484 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2485 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2486 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2487 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2488 |
25012 | 2489 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2490 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2491 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2492 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2493 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2494 #endif |
25012 | 2495 } |
2496 | |
2497 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2498 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2499 can be done simply. */ | |
2500 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2501 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2502 | |
2503 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2504 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2505 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2506 | |
2507 /* Next row. */ | |
2508 ++window_y; | |
2509 ++frame_y; | |
2510 } | |
2511 } | |
2512 | |
2513 | |
2514 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2515 | |
2516 Each row has the form: | |
2517 | |
2518 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2519 | left | text | right | | |
2520 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2521 | |
2522 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2523 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2524 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2525 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2526 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2527 | |
2528 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2529 | |
2530 static void | |
2531 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2532 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2533 { | |
2534 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2535 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2536 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2537 } | |
2538 | |
2539 | |
2540 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2541 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2542 | |
2543 static void | |
2544 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2545 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2546 int area; | |
2547 { | |
2548 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2549 { | |
2550 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2551 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2552 | |
2553 while (text < end) | |
2554 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2555 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2556 } | |
2557 } | |
2558 | |
2559 | |
2560 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2561 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2562 | |
2563 static void | |
2564 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2565 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2566 int upto; | |
2567 { | |
2568 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2569 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2570 | |
2571 while (i < upto) | |
2572 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2573 | |
2574 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2575 } | |
2576 | |
2577 | |
2578 | |
2579 /********************************************************************** | |
2580 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2581 **********************************************************************/ | |
2582 | |
2583 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2584 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2585 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2586 | |
2587 static INLINE void | |
2588 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2589 struct frame *f; | |
2590 { | |
2591 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2592 } | |
2593 | |
2594 | |
2595 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2596 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2597 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2598 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2599 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2600 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2601 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2602 | |
2603 static INLINE void | |
2604 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2605 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2606 int row; | |
2607 { | |
2608 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2609 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2610 | |
2611 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2612 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2613 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2614 | |
2615 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2616 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2617 | |
2618 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2619 for window matrices. */ | |
2620 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2621 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2622 } | |
2623 | |
2624 | |
2625 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2626 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2627 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2628 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2629 | |
2630 static void | |
2631 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2632 struct window *w; | |
2633 int frame_row; | |
2634 { | |
2635 while (w) | |
2636 { | |
2637 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2638 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2639 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2640 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2641 else | |
2642 { | |
2643 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2644 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2645 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2646 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2647 | |
2648 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2649 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2650 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2651 { |
25012 | 2652 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2653 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2654 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2655 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2656 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2657 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2658 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2659 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2660 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2661 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2662 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2663 } |
25012 | 2664 |
2665 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2666 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2667 } |
25012 | 2668 |
2669 | |
2670 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2671 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2672 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2673 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2674 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2675 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2676 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2677 | |
2678 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2679 | |
2680 void | |
2681 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2682 retained_p) | |
2683 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2684 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2685 int *copy_from; | |
2686 char *retained_p; | |
2687 { | |
2688 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2689 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2690 | |
2691 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2692 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2693 | |
2694 int i; | |
2695 | |
2696 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2697 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2698 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2699 | |
2700 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2701 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2702 { | |
2703 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2704 | |
2705 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2706 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2707 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2708 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2709 | |
2710 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2711 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2712 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2713 } | |
2714 | |
2715 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2716 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2717 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2718 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2719 } | |
2720 | |
2721 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2722 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2723 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2724 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2725 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2726 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2727 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2728 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2729 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2730 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2731 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2732 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2733 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2734 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2735 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2736 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2737 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2738 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2739 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2740 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2741 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2742 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2743 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2744 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2745 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2746 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2747 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2748 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2749 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2750 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2751 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2752 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2753 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2754 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2755 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2756 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2757 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2758 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2759 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2760 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2761 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2762 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2763 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2764 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2765 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2766 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2767 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2768 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2769 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2770 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2771 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2777 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2778 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2779 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2780 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2781 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2782 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2783 |
25012 | 2784 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2785 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2786 | |
2787 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2788 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2789 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2790 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2791 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2792 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2793 which is empty. */ | |
2794 | |
2795 static void | |
2796 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2797 struct window *w; | |
2798 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2799 int *copy_from; | |
2800 char *retained_p; | |
2801 { | |
2802 while (w) | |
2803 { | |
2804 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2805 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2806 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2807 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2808 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2809 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2810 else | |
2811 { | |
2812 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2813 matrix m. */ | |
2814 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2815 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2816 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2817 | |
2818 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2819 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2820 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2821 | |
2822 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2823 { | |
2824 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2825 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2826 | |
2827 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2828 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2829 | |
2830 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2831 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2832 | |
2833 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2834 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2835 | |
2836 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2837 int from_inside_window_p | |
2838 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2839 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2840 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2841 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2842 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2843 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2844 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2845 { |
2846 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2847 int enabled_before_p; | |
2848 | |
2849 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2850 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2851 that. */ | |
2852 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2853 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2854 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2855 | |
2856 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2857 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2858 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2859 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2860 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2861 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2862 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2863 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2864 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2865 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2866 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2867 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2868 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2869 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2870 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2871 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2872 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2873 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2874 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2875 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2876 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2877 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2878 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2879 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2880 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2881 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2882 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2883 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2884 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2885 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2886 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2887 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2888 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2889 |
2890 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2891 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2892 } | |
2893 | |
2894 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2895 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2896 } | |
2897 } | |
2898 | |
2899 | |
2900 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2901 | |
2902 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2903 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2904 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2905 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2906 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2907 |
21514 | 2908 void |
25012 | 2909 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2910 struct window *w; |
2911 { | |
25012 | 2912 while (w) |
2913 { | |
2914 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2915 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2916 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2917 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2918 else | |
2919 { | |
2920 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2921 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2922 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2923 } | |
2924 | |
2925 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2926 } | |
2927 } | |
2928 | |
2929 | |
2930 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2931 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2932 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2933 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2934 | |
2935 static void | |
2936 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2937 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2938 { | |
2939 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2940 int i = 0; | |
2941 | |
2942 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2943 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2944 | |
2945 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2946 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2947 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2948 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2949 { | |
2950 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2951 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2952 abort (); | |
2953 ++i, ++j; | |
2954 } | |
2955 } | |
2956 | |
2957 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2958 | |
2959 | |
2960 | |
2961 /********************************************************************** | |
2962 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2963 **********************************************************************/ | |
2964 | |
2965 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2966 | |
2967 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2968 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2969 | |
2970 static int | |
2971 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2972 struct window *w; | |
2973 int vpos; | |
2974 { | |
2975 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2976 | |
2977 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2978 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2979 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2980 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2981 return vpos; | |
2982 } | |
2983 | |
2984 | |
2985 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
2986 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2987 | |
2988 static int | |
2989 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
2990 struct window *w; | |
2991 int hpos; | |
2992 { | |
2993 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2994 | |
2995 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2996 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
2997 return hpos; | |
314 | 2998 } |
25012 | 2999 |
3000 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
3001 | |
3002 | |
314 | 3003 |
25012 | 3004 /********************************************************************** |
3005 Redrawing Frames | |
3006 **********************************************************************/ | |
3007 | |
3008 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3009 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3010 (frame) | |
3011 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3012 { | |
3013 struct frame *f; | |
3014 | |
3015 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3016 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3017 | |
3018 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3019 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3020 called so early here). */ | |
3021 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3022 return Qnil; | |
3023 | |
3024 update_begin (f); | |
3025 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3026 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3027 clear_frame (); | |
3028 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3029 update_end (f); | |
3030 fflush (stdout); | |
3031 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3032 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3033 its redisplay done. */ | |
3034 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3035 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3036 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3037 return Qnil; | |
3038 } | |
3039 | |
3040 | |
3041 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3042 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3043 | |
3044 void | |
3045 redraw_frame (f) | |
3046 struct frame *f; | |
3047 { | |
3048 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3049 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3050 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3051 } | |
3052 | |
3053 | |
3054 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3055 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3056 () | |
3057 { | |
3058 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3059 | |
3060 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3061 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3062 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3063 | |
3064 return Qnil; | |
3065 } | |
3066 | |
3067 | |
3068 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3069 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3070 | |
3071 void | |
3072 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3073 { | |
3074 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3075 | |
3076 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3077 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3078 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3079 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3080 } | |
3081 | |
3082 | |
3083 | |
3084 /*********************************************************************** | |
3085 Direct Operations | |
3086 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3087 | |
3088 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3089 | |
3090 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3091 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3092 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3093 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3094 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3095 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3096 | |
3097 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3098 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3099 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3100 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3101 |
3102 int | |
3103 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3104 int g; | |
3105 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3106 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3107 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3108 struct it it, it2; | |
3109 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3110 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3111 int n; | |
3112 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3113 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3114 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3115 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3116 int added_width; | |
3117 struct text_pos pos; | |
3118 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3119 | |
3120 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3121 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3122 | |
3123 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3124 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3125 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3126 || fonts_changed_p | |
3127 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3128 || face_change_count | |
3129 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3130 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3131 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3132 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3133 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3134 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3135 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3136 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3137 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3138 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3139 || (overwrite_p | |
3140 && PT != ZV | |
3141 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3142 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3143 || g == '\t' | |
3144 || g == '\n' | |
3145 || g == '\r' | |
3146 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3147 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3148 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3149 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3150 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3151 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3152 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3153 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3154 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3155 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3156 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3157 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3158 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3159 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3160 return 0; | |
3161 | |
3162 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3163 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3164 position. */ | |
3165 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3166 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
28361
eccb57c44da5
(direct_output_for_insert): Use DEC_TEXT_POS
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27968
diff
changeset
|
3167 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos, !NILP (current_buffer->enable_multibyte_characters)); |
25012 | 3168 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, |
3169 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3170 | |
3171 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3172 | |
3173 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3174 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3175 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3176 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3177 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3178 { | |
3179 struct glyph *last; | |
3180 | |
3181 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3182 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3183 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3184 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3185 return 0; |
3186 } | |
3187 | |
3188 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3189 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3190 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3191 return 0; | |
3192 | |
3193 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3194 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3195 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3196 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3197 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3198 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3199 | |
3200 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3201 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3202 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3203 combination of both. */ | |
3204 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3205 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3206 { | |
3207 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3208 | |
3209 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3210 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3211 return 0; | |
3212 | |
3213 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3214 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3215 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3216 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3217 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3218 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3219 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3220 return 0; | |
3221 | |
3222 delta += 1; | |
3223 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3224 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3225 } | |
3226 | |
3227 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3228 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3229 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3230 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3231 return 0; |
3232 | |
25012 | 3233 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3234 it2 = it; | |
3235 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3236 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3237 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3238 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3239 { | |
3240 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3241 return 0; | |
3242 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3243 } | |
3244 | |
3245 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3246 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3247 | |
3248 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3249 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3250 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3251 | |
3252 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3253 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3254 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3255 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3256 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3257 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3258 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3259 | |
3260 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3261 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3262 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3263 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3264 while (glyph < end) | |
3265 { | |
3266 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3267 ++glyph; | |
3268 } | |
3269 | |
3270 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3271 inserted ones. */ | |
3272 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3273 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3274 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3275 | |
3276 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3277 { | |
3278 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3279 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3280 } | |
3281 | |
3282 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3283 increment_matrix_positions (w->current_matrix, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3284 w->cursor.vpos + 1, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3285 w->current_matrix->nrows, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3286 delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 3287 |
3288 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3289 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3290 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3291 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3292 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3293 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3294 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3295 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3296 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3297 | |
3298 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3299 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3300 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3301 and updated_row. */ | |
3302 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3303 update_begin (f); | |
3304 if (rif) | |
3305 { | |
3306 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3307 | |
3308 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3309 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3310 else | |
3311 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3312 } | |
3313 else | |
3314 { | |
3315 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3316 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3317 else | |
3318 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3319 } | |
3320 | |
3321 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3322 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3323 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3324 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3325 | |
3326 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3327 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3328 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3329 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3330 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3331 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3332 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3333 else | |
3334 { | |
3335 int x, y; | |
3336 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3337 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3338 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3339 : 0)); | |
3340 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3341 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3342 } | |
3343 | |
3344 if (rif) | |
3345 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3346 update_end (f); | |
3347 updated_row = NULL; | |
3348 fflush (stdout); | |
3349 | |
3350 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3351 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3352 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3353 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3354 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3355 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3356 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3357 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3358 |
25012 | 3359 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3360 return 1; |
3361 } | |
3362 | |
25012 | 3363 |
3364 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3365 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3366 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3367 | |
314 | 3368 int |
3369 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3370 int n; | |
3371 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3372 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3373 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3374 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3375 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3376 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
3377 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, XINT (w->last_point), |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3378 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3379 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3380 |
25012 | 3381 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3382 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3383 return 0; |
25012 | 3384 |
3385 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3386 displaying a message. */ | |
3387 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3388 return 0; | |
3389 | |
3390 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3391 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3392 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3393 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3394 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3395 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3396 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3397 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3398 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3399 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3400 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3401 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3402 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3403 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3404 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3405 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3406 |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3407 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3408 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3409 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3410 |
25012 | 3411 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3412 | |
3413 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3414 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3415 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3416 |
25012 | 3417 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3418 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3419 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3420 |
3421 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3422 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3423 | |
3424 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3425 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3426 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3427 else | |
3428 { | |
3429 int x, y; | |
3430 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3431 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3432 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3433 : 0)); | |
3434 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3435 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3436 } | |
3437 | |
314 | 3438 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3439 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3440 return 1; |
3441 } | |
25012 | 3442 |
3443 | |
314 | 3444 |
25012 | 3445 /*********************************************************************** |
3446 Frame Update | |
3447 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3448 | |
3449 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3450 | |
3451 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3452 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3453 scrolling. | |
3454 | |
3455 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3456 |
3457 int | |
25012 | 3458 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3459 struct frame *f; | |
3460 int force_p; | |
3461 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3462 { | |
3463 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3464 int paused_p; | |
3465 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3466 | |
3467 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3468 { | |
3469 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3470 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3471 | |
3472 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3473 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3474 | |
3475 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3476 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3477 update_begin (f); | |
3478 | |
3479 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3480 support. */ | |
3481 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3482 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3483 | |
3484 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3485 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3486 { |
3487 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3488 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3489 |
3490 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3491 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3492 { | |
3493 update_window (w, 1); | |
3494 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3495 | |
3496 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3497 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3498 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3499 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3500 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3501 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3502 |
3503 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3504 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3505 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3506 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3507 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3508 } |
3509 } | |
3510 | |
3511 | |
3512 /* Update windows. */ | |
3513 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3514 update_end (f); | |
3515 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3516 | |
3517 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3518 #if 0 | |
3519 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3520 #endif | |
3521 } | |
3522 else | |
3523 { | |
3524 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3525 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3526 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3527 | |
3528 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3529 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3530 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3531 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3532 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3533 | |
3534 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3535 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3536 | |
3537 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3538 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3539 } | |
3540 | |
3541 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3542 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3543 return paused_p; | |
3544 } | |
3545 | |
3546 | |
3547 | |
3548 /************************************************************************ | |
3549 Window-based updates | |
3550 ************************************************************************/ | |
3551 | |
3552 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3553 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3554 | |
3555 static int | |
3556 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3557 struct window *w; | |
3558 int force_p; | |
3559 { | |
3560 int paused_p = 0; | |
3561 | |
3562 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3563 { | |
3564 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3565 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3566 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3567 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3568 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3569 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3570 | |
3571 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3572 } | |
3573 | |
3574 return paused_p; | |
3575 } | |
3576 | |
3577 | |
3578 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3579 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3580 | |
3581 void | |
3582 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3583 struct window *w; | |
3584 int force_p; | |
3585 { | |
3586 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3587 { | |
3588 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3589 | |
3590 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3591 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3592 | |
3593 /* Update W. */ | |
3594 update_begin (f); | |
3595 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3596 update_end (f); | |
3597 | |
3598 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3599 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3600 } | |
3601 } | |
3602 | |
3603 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3604 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3605 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3606 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3607 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3608 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3609 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3610 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3611 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3612 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3613 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3614 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3615 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3616 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3617 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3618 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3619 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3620 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3621 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3622 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3623 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3624 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3625 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3626 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3627 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3628 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3629 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3630 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3631 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3632 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3633 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3634 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3635 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3636 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3637 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3638 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3639 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3640 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3641 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3642 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3643 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3644 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3645 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3646 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3647 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3648 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3649 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3650 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3651 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3652 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3653 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3654 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3655 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3656 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3657 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3658 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3664 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3665 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3666 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3669 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3673 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3674 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3678 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3695 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3696 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3697 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3698 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 |
25012 | 3702 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3703 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3704 | |
3705 static int | |
3706 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3707 struct window *w; | |
3708 int force_p; | |
3709 { | |
3710 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3711 int paused_p; | |
3712 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3713 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3714 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3715 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3716 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3717 #endif |
25012 | 3718 |
3719 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3720 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3721 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3722 | |
3723 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3724 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3725 force_p = 1; | |
3726 else | |
3727 detect_input_pending (); | |
3728 | |
3729 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3730 the update. */ | |
3731 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3732 { | |
3733 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3734 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3735 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3736 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3737 |
3738 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3739 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3740 | |
3741 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3742 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3743 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3744 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3745 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3746 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3747 |
3748 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3749 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3750 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3751 { | |
3752 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3753 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3754 desired_matrix)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3755 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3756 } |
3757 | |
3758 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3759 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3760 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3761 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3762 ++row; | |
3763 | |
3764 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3765 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3766 { | |
25546 | 3767 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3768 if (rc < 0) |
3769 { | |
3770 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3771 paused_p = 0; | |
3772 goto set_cursor; | |
3773 } | |
3774 else if (rc > 0) | |
3775 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3776 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3777 } |
3778 | |
3779 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3780 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3781 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3782 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3783 { |
25546 | 3784 header_line_row->y = 0; |
25012 | 3785 update_window_line (w, 0); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3786 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3787 } |
3788 | |
3789 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3790 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3791 if (row->enabled_p | |
3792 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3793 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3794 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3795 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3796 { | |
3797 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3798 int i; | |
3799 | |
3800 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3801 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3802 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3803 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3804 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3805 detect_input_pending (); | |
3806 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3807 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3808 |
3809 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3810 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3811 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3812 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3813 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3814 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3815 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3816 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3817 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3818 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3819 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3820 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3821 } | |
3822 | |
3823 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3824 paused_p = row < end; | |
3825 | |
3826 set_cursor: | |
3827 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3828 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3829 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3830 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3831 && changed_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3832 && !paused_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3833 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3834 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3835 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3836 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3837 |
25012 | 3838 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3839 { | |
3840 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3841 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3842 | |
3843 #if 0 | |
3844 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3845 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3846 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3847 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3848 #endif | |
3849 } | |
3850 | |
3851 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3852 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3853 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3854 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3855 |
25012 | 3856 /* End of update of window W. */ |
3857 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3858 |
25012 | 3859 } |
3860 else | |
3861 paused_p = 1; | |
3862 | |
3863 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3864 |
25012 | 3865 return paused_p; |
3866 } | |
3867 | |
3868 | |
3869 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3870 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3871 | |
3872 static void | |
3873 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3874 struct window *w; | |
3875 int area, vpos; | |
3876 { | |
3877 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3878 | |
3879 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3880 will be relative to. */ | |
3881 updated_area = area; | |
3882 | |
3883 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3884 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3885 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3886 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3887 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3888 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3889 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3890 } | |
3891 | |
3892 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3893 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3894 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3895 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3896 static int |
25012 | 3897 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3898 struct window *w; | |
3899 int vpos; | |
314 | 3900 { |
25012 | 3901 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3902 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3903 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3904 |
3905 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3906 will be relative to. */ | |
3907 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3908 | |
3909 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3910 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3911 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3912 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3913 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3914 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3915 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3916 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3917 || current_row->overlapped_p |
25012 | 3918 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3919 { | |
3920 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3921 | |
3922 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3923 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3924 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3925 | |
3926 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3927 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3928 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3929 } |
3930 else | |
3931 { | |
3932 int stop, i, x; | |
3933 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3934 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3935 | |
3936 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3937 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3938 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3939 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3940 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3941 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3942 | |
3943 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3944 i = 0; | |
3945 x = desired_row->x; | |
3946 | |
3947 while (i < stop) | |
3948 { | |
3949 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3950 don't have to be written. */ | |
3951 while (i < stop | |
3952 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3953 { | |
3954 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3955 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3956 } | |
3957 | |
3958 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3959 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3960 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3961 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3962 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3963 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3964 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3965 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3966 && i > 0 | |
3967 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3968 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3969 { | |
3970 int left, right; | |
3971 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3972 &left, &right); | |
3973 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3974 { | |
3975 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
3976 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3977 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3978 } | |
3979 } | |
3980 | |
3981 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
3982 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
3983 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
3984 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
3985 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3986 { | |
3987 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
3988 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
3989 int current_x = x; | |
3990 | |
3991 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
3992 while (i < stop | |
3993 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
3994 && x == current_x) | |
3995 { | |
3996 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3997 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3998 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3999 } | |
4000 | |
4001 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
4002 { | |
4003 i = start_hpos; | |
4004 x = start_x; | |
4005 desired_glyph = start; | |
4006 break; | |
4007 } | |
4008 | |
4009 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
4010 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4011 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4012 } |
4013 } | |
4014 | |
4015 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4016 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4017 { | |
4018 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4019 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4020 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4021 } |
4022 | |
4023 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4024 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4025 { | |
4026 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4027 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4028 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4029 appropriately above. */ | |
4030 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4031 } | |
4032 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4033 { | |
4034 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4035 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4036 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4037 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4038 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4039 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4040 } |
4041 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4042 { | |
4043 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4044 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4045 int x; | |
4046 | |
4047 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4048 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4049 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4050 | |
4051 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4052 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4053 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4054 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4055 this way. */ | |
4056 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4057 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4058 { | |
4059 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4060 x = -1; | |
4061 } | |
4062 else | |
4063 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4064 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4065 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4066 } |
4067 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4068 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4069 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4070 } |
4071 | |
4072 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4073 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4074 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4075 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4076 static int |
25012 | 4077 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
4078 struct window *w; | |
4079 int vpos; | |
4080 { | |
4081 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4082 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4083 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4084 |
4085 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
4086 | |
4087 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4088 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4089 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4090 | |
4091 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4092 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4093 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4094 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4095 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4096 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4097 } |
25012 | 4098 |
4099 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4100 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
25012 | 4101 |
4102 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4103 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4104 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4105 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4106 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4107 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4108 } |
25012 | 4109 |
4110 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
4111 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
4112 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
4113 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
4114 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
4115 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
4116 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
4117 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
4118 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
4119 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
4120 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
4121 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
4122 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
4123 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
4124 | |
4125 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4126 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4127 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4128 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4129 } |
4130 | |
4131 | |
4132 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4133 be called from update_window. */ | |
4134 | |
4135 static void | |
4136 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4137 struct window *w; | |
4138 { | |
4139 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4140 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4141 | |
4142 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4143 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4144 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4145 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4146 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4147 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4148 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4149 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4150 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4151 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4152 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4153 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4154 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4155 { | |
4156 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4157 | |
4158 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4159 { | |
4160 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4161 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4162 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4163 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4164 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4165 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4166 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4167 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4168 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4169 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4170 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4171 ++row) |
25012 | 4172 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4173 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4174 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4175 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4176 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4177 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4178 break; |
25012 | 4179 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4180 |
25012 | 4181 if (last_row) |
4182 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4183 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4184 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4185 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4186 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4187 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4188 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4189 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4190 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4191 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4192 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4193 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4194 |
25012 | 4195 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4196 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4197 } |
4198 } | |
4199 } | |
4200 else | |
4201 { | |
4202 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4203 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4204 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4205 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4206 } | |
4207 | |
4208 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4209 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4210 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4211 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4212 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4213 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4214 } | |
4215 | |
4216 | |
4217 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
25546 | 4218 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4219 |
4220 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4221 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4222 O(N) time. | |
4223 | |
4224 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4225 | |
4226 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4227 | |
4228 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4229 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4230 | |
4231 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4232 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4233 | |
4234 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4235 forward and backward. | |
4236 | |
4237 Value is | |
4238 | |
4239 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4240 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4241 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4242 | |
4243 static int | |
25546 | 4244 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4245 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4246 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4247 { |
4248 struct symbol | |
4249 { | |
4250 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
4251 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
4252 | |
4253 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
4254 short new_line_number; | |
4255 | |
4256 /* The line itself. */ | |
4257 struct glyph_row *row; | |
4258 | |
4259 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
4260 struct symbol *next; | |
4261 }; | |
4262 | |
4263 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
4264 struct symbol **table; | |
4265 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
4266 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
4267 struct symbol *sym; | |
4268 struct run **runs; | |
4269 int nruns; | |
4270 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4271 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4272 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
4273 | |
4274 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
25546 | 4275 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
25012 | 4276 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
4277 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4278 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
4279 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4280 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4281 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4282 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
4283 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
4284 { | |
4285 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4286 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4287 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4288 ++i; | |
4289 } | |
4290 | |
4291 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4292 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4293 return -1; | |
4294 | |
4295 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4296 | |
4297 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4298 desired matrix. */ | |
4299 i = first_new + 1; | |
4300 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4301 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
4302 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4303 ++i; | |
4304 | |
4305 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4306 return 0; | |
4307 | |
4308 last_new = i; | |
4309 | |
4310 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4311 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4312 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4313 disabled. */ | |
4314 i = first_old + 1; | |
4315 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4316 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4317 ++i; | |
4318 last_old = i; | |
4319 | |
4320 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4321 i = last_new; | |
4322 j = last_old; | |
4323 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4324 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4325 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4326 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4327 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4328 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4329 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
4330 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
4331 --i, --j; | |
4332 last_new = i; | |
4333 last_old = j; | |
4334 | |
4335 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4336 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4337 return 0; | |
4338 | |
4339 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
4340 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4341 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4342 | |
4343 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
4344 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
4345 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
4346 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
4347 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
4348 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
4349 | |
4350 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
4351 do \ | |
4352 { \ | |
4353 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
4354 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
4355 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
4356 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
4357 sym = sym->next; \ | |
4358 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
4359 { \ | |
4360 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
4361 sym->row = row_; \ | |
4362 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
4363 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
4364 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
4365 } \ | |
4366 } \ | |
4367 while (0) | |
4368 | |
4369 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4370 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
4371 { | |
4372 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4373 { | |
4374 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
4375 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4376 ++sym->old_uses; | |
4377 } | |
4378 else | |
4379 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
4380 } | |
4381 | |
4382 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4383 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4384 { | |
4385 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4386 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4387 ++sym->new_uses; | |
4388 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4389 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
4390 } | |
4391 | |
4392 #undef ADDSYM | |
4393 | |
4394 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
4395 height of copied areas. */ | |
4396 nruns = 0; | |
4397 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
4398 | |
4399 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4400 in both matrices. */ | |
4401 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
4402 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
4403 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
4404 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
4405 { | |
4406 int j, k; | |
4407 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
4408 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
4409 | |
4410 /* Record move. */ | |
4411 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4412 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4413 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4414 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4415 run->nrows = 1; | |
4416 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4417 | |
4418 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4419 j = i - 1; | |
4420 k = new_line - 1; | |
4421 while (j > first_old | |
4422 && k > first_new | |
4423 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4424 { | |
4425 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4426 --run->current_vpos; | |
4427 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4428 ++run->nrows; | |
4429 run->height += h; | |
4430 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4431 run->current_y -= h; | |
4432 --j, --k; | |
4433 } | |
4434 | |
4435 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4436 j = i + 1; | |
4437 k = new_line + 1; | |
4438 while (j < last_old | |
4439 && k < last_new | |
4440 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4441 { | |
4442 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4443 ++run->nrows; | |
4444 run->height += h; | |
4445 ++j, ++k; | |
4446 } | |
4447 | |
4448 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4449 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4450 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4451 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4452 case. */ | |
4453 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4454 ; | |
4455 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4456 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4457 runs[j] = run; | |
4458 ++nruns; | |
4459 | |
4460 i += run->nrows; | |
4461 } | |
4462 else | |
4463 ++i; | |
4464 | |
4465 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4466 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4467 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4468 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4469 | |
4470 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4471 | A | | B | | |
4472 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4473 | B | | A | | |
4474 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4475 | |
4476 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4477 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4478 | |
4479 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4480 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4481 { | |
4482 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4483 | |
4484 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4485 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4486 { | |
4487 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4488 | |
4489 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4490 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4491 { | |
4492 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4493 | |
4494 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4495 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4496 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4497 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4498 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4499 p->nrows = 0; | |
4500 } | |
4501 } | |
4502 | |
4503 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4504 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4505 { | |
4506 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4507 int to_overlapped_p; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4508 |
25012 | 4509 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4510 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4511 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
4512 assign_row (to, from); | |
4513 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4514 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4515 } |
4516 } | |
4517 | |
4518 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
4519 return 1; | |
4520 } | |
4521 | |
4522 | |
4523 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
4524 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
4525 | |
4526 void | |
4527 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
4528 struct window *w; | |
4529 int on_p; | |
4530 { | |
4531 while (w) | |
4532 { | |
4533 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
4534 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
4535 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
4536 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
4537 else | |
4538 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
4539 | |
4540 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
4541 } | |
4542 } | |
4543 | |
4544 | |
4545 | |
4546 /************************************************************************ | |
4547 Frame-Based Updates | |
4548 ************************************************************************/ | |
4549 | |
4550 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4551 | |
4552 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4553 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4554 should not be tried. | |
4555 | |
4556 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4557 | |
4558 static int | |
4559 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4560 struct frame *f; | |
4561 int force_p; | |
4562 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4563 { | |
4564 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4565 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4566 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4567 int i; | |
314 | 4568 int pause; |
4569 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4570 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4571 |
4572 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4573 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4574 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4575 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4576 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4577 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4578 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4579 |
314 | 4580 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4581 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4582 { |
4583 pause = 1; | |
4584 goto do_pause; | |
4585 } | |
4586 | |
764 | 4587 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4588 |
25012 | 4589 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4590 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4591 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4592 |
493 | 4593 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4594 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4595 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4596 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4597 break; |
4598 | |
4599 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4600 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4601 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4602 |
4603 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4604 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4605 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4606 | |
4607 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4608 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4609 { |
25012 | 4610 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4611 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4612 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4613 { |
4614 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4615 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4616 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4617 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4618 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4619 if (outq > 900 | |
4620 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4621 { | |
4622 fflush (stdout); | |
4623 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4624 { | |
554 | 4625 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4626 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4627 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4628 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4629 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4630 #endif | |
4631 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4632 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4633 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4634 } |
4635 } | |
4636 } | |
4637 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4638 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4639 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4640 |
25012 | 4641 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4642 } |
4643 } | |
25012 | 4644 |
764 | 4645 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4646 |
4647 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4648 if (!pause) | |
4649 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4650 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4651 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4652 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4653 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4654 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4655 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4656 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4657 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4658 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4659 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4660 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4661 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4662 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4663 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4664 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4665 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4666 { |
25012 | 4667 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4668 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4669 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4670 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4671 } |
708 | 4672 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4673 { |
25012 | 4674 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4675 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4676 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4677 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4678 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4679 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4680 { |
25012 | 4681 --row; |
4682 col = 0; | |
4683 | |
4684 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4685 { | |
4686 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4687 must be ignored here. */ | |
4688 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4689 row); | |
4690 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4691 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4692 | |
4693 while (last > start | |
4694 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4695 --last; | |
4696 | |
4697 col = last - start; | |
4698 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4699 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4700 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4701 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4702 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4703 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4704 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4705 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4706 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4707 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4708 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4709 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4710 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4711 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4712 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4713 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4714 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4715 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4716 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4717 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4718 } |
314 | 4719 else |
25012 | 4720 { |
4721 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4722 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4723 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
4724 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0) | |
4725 { | |
4726 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4727 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4728 | |
4729 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4730 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4731 | |
4732 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4733 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4734 } | |
4735 } | |
314 | 4736 } |
4737 | |
764 | 4738 update_end (f); |
314 | 4739 |
4740 if (termscript) | |
4741 fflush (termscript); | |
4742 fflush (stdout); | |
4743 | |
4744 do_pause: | |
4745 | |
4746 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4747 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4748 return pause; |
4749 } | |
4750 | |
25012 | 4751 |
4752 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4753 |
21514 | 4754 int |
764 | 4755 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4756 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4757 { |
4758 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4759 int window_size; | |
4760 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4761 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4762 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4763 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4764 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4765 register int i; |
764 | 4766 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4767 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4768 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4769 | |
4770 if (!current_matrix) | |
4771 abort (); | |
4772 | |
4773 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4774 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4775 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4776 changed_lines = 0; |
4777 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4778 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4779 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4780 { |
4781 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4782 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4783 return 0; |
25012 | 4784 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4785 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4786 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4787 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4788 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4789 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4790 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4791 } |
314 | 4792 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4793 { |
25012 | 4794 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4795 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4796 } |
314 | 4797 |
4798 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4799 { | |
4800 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4801 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4802 } |
4803 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4804 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4805 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4806 } |
4807 | |
4808 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4809 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4810 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4811 return 1; |
4812 | |
764 | 4813 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4814 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4815 | |
4816 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4817 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4818 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4819 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4820 | |
4821 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4822 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4823 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4824 && (window_size >= |
4825 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4826 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4827 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4828 return 0; | |
4829 | |
25012 | 4830 if (window_size < 2) |
4831 return 0; | |
4832 | |
764 | 4833 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4834 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4835 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4836 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4837 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4838 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4839 | |
4840 return 0; | |
4841 } | |
25012 | 4842 |
4843 | |
4844 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4845 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4846 | |
4847 static int | |
4848 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4849 struct glyph *r; | |
4850 int len; | |
314 | 4851 { |
25012 | 4852 int i; |
4853 | |
4854 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4855 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4856 break; | |
4857 | |
4858 return i; | |
314 | 4859 } |
25012 | 4860 |
4861 | |
4862 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4863 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4864 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4865 |
4866 static int | |
25012 | 4867 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4868 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4869 { |
25012 | 4870 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4871 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4872 | |
4873 while (p1 < end1 | |
4874 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
4875 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 4876 ++p1, ++p2; |
4877 | |
4878 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4879 } |
4880 | |
25012 | 4881 |
314 | 4882 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4883 |
314 | 4884 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4885 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 4886 |
25012 | 4887 |
4888 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
4889 | |
314 | 4890 static void |
25012 | 4891 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
4892 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 4893 int vpos; |
4894 { | |
25012 | 4895 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 4896 int tem; |
4897 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 4898 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4899 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4900 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4901 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
4902 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
4903 | |
4904 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
4905 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 4906 { |
25012 | 4907 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
4908 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
4909 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 4910 } |
4911 else | |
25012 | 4912 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
4913 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4914 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4915 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 4916 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
4917 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 4918 { |
25012 | 4919 obody = 0; |
314 | 4920 olen = 0; |
4921 } | |
4922 else | |
4923 { | |
25012 | 4924 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
4925 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4926 | |
4927 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 4928 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4929 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 4930 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 4931 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 4932 olen--; |
4933 } | |
4934 else | |
4935 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4936 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4937 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4938 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 4939 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
4940 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4941 } |
4942 } | |
4943 | |
25012 | 4944 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4945 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4946 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
4947 | |
4948 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
4949 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 4950 { |
4951 nlen = 0; | |
4952 goto just_erase; | |
4953 } | |
4954 | |
25012 | 4955 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
4956 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4957 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
4958 | |
4959 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
4960 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
4961 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4962 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4963 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4964 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4965 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4966 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4967 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4968 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4969 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4970 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4971 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4972 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4973 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4974 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4975 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4976 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4977 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4978 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4979 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4980 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4981 } |
28682
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4982 else |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4983 /* Make sure we are in the right row, otherwise cursor movement |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4984 with cmgoto might use `ch' in the wrong row. */ |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4985 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
4986 |
25012 | 4987 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
4988 return; | |
4989 } | |
314 | 4990 |
4991 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
4992 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 4993 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 4994 { |
4995 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 4996 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 4997 nlen--; |
4998 } | |
4999 else | |
5000 { | |
25012 | 5001 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
5002 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
5003 all the way across. */ | |
5004 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
5005 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5006 } |
5007 | |
5008 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
5009 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
5010 { | |
25012 | 5011 int i, j; |
5012 | |
5013 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5014 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5015 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5016 { | |
25012 | 5017 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5018 { |
25012 | 5019 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5020 j = i + 1; | |
5021 while (j < nlen | |
5022 && (j >= olen | |
5023 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5024 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5025 ++j; | |
5026 | |
5027 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5028 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5029 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5030 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5031 |
5032 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5033 } | |
5034 } | |
5035 | |
5036 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5037 if (olen > nlen) | |
5038 { | |
5039 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5040 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5041 } | |
5042 | |
25012 | 5043 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5044 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5045 return; |
5046 } | |
5047 | |
25012 | 5048 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5049 characters in a row. */ | |
5050 | |
314 | 5051 if (!olen) |
5052 { | |
25012 | 5053 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5054 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
5055 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
5056 nsp = 0; | |
5057 else | |
5058 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5059 | |
314 | 5060 if (nlen > nsp) |
5061 { | |
5062 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5063 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5064 } | |
5065 | |
764 | 5066 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5067 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5068 return; |
5069 } | |
5070 | |
5071 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5072 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
5073 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5074 | |
5075 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5076 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5077 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5078 |
5079 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5080 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
5081 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
5082 { | |
5083 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5084 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5085 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5086 } |
5087 | |
5088 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5089 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5090 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5091 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5092 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5093 | |
5094 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5095 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5096 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5097 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5098 while (op1 > op2 |
5099 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5100 { |
5101 op1--; | |
5102 np1--; | |
5103 } | |
5104 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5105 | |
5106 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5107 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5108 Is it worth it? */ | |
5109 | |
5110 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5111 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5112 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5113 endmatch = 0; |
5114 | |
5115 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5116 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5117 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5118 Is it worth it? */ | |
5119 | |
5120 if (nsp != osp | |
5121 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5122 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5123 { |
5124 begmatch = 0; | |
5125 endmatch = 0; | |
5126 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5127 } | |
5128 | |
5129 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5130 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5131 | |
5132 if (osp > nsp) | |
5133 { | |
5134 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5135 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5136 } | |
5137 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5138 { | |
5139 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5140 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5141 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5142 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5143 { | |
5144 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5145 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5146 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5147 } | |
5148 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5149 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5150 } |
5151 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5152 | |
5153 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5154 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5155 { | |
5156 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5157 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5158 { | |
5159 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5160 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5161 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5162 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5163 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5164 olen = 0; |
5165 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5166 } | |
5167 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5168 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5169 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5170 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5171 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5172 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5173 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5174 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5175 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5176 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5177 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5178 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5179 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5180 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5181 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5182 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5183 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5184 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5185 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5186 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5187 olen = nlen; |
5188 } | |
5189 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5190 { | |
5191 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5192 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5193 olen = nlen; | |
5194 } | |
5195 } | |
5196 | |
5197 just_erase: | |
5198 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5199 if (olen > nlen) | |
5200 { | |
5201 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5202 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5203 } | |
5204 | |
764 | 5205 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5206 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5207 } |
25012 | 5208 |
5209 | |
314 | 5210 |
25012 | 5211 /*********************************************************************** |
5212 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5213 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5214 | |
5215 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5216 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5217 boundaries. */ | |
5218 | |
5219 int | |
5220 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5221 struct window *w; | |
5222 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5223 { |
25012 | 5224 struct it it; |
5225 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5226 struct text_pos startp; | |
5227 int left_area_width; | |
5228 | |
5229 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5230 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5231 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5232 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5233 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5234 | |
5235 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5236 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5237 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5238 | |
5239 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5240 *y = it.current_y; | |
5241 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5242 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5243 } | |
5244 | |
5245 | |
5246 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5247 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5248 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5249 the string returned. */ | |
5250 | |
5251 Lisp_Object | |
5252 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5253 struct window *w; | |
5254 int x, y; | |
5255 int *charpos; | |
5256 { | |
5257 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5258 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5259 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5260 int x0; | |
5261 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5262 | |
5263 if (mode_line_p) | |
5264 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5265 else | |
25546 | 5266 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5267 |
5268 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5269 { |
25012 | 5270 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5271 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5272 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5273 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5274 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5275 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5276 |
5277 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5278 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5279 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5280 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5281 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5282 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5283 { | |
5284 string = glyph->object; | |
5285 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5286 break; | |
5287 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5288 } |
25012 | 5289 |
5290 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5291 } |
25012 | 5292 |
5293 | |
5294 /*********************************************************************** | |
5295 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5296 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5297 |
5298 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5299 |
493 | 5300 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5301 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5302 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5303 { |
5304 int width, height; | |
5305 extern int errno; | |
5306 int old_errno = errno; | |
5307 | |
764 | 5308 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5309 |
764 | 5310 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5311 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5312 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5313 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5314 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5315 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5316 | |
5317 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5318 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5319 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5320 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5321 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5322 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5323 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5324 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5325 break; |
5326 } | |
5327 } | |
5328 } | |
5329 | |
5330 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5331 errno = old_errno; | |
5332 } | |
5333 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5334 | |
5335 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5336 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5337 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5338 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5339 |
21514 | 5340 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5341 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5342 int safe; |
314 | 5343 { |
5344 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5345 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5346 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5347 |
314 | 5348 while (delayed_size_change) |
5349 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5350 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5351 |
5352 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5353 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5354 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5355 { |
25012 | 5356 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5357 |
764 | 5358 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5359 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5360 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5361 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5362 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5363 } |
5364 } | |
5365 } | |
5366 | |
5367 | |
764 | 5368 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5369 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5370 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5371 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5372 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5373 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5374 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5375 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5376 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5377 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5378 |
21514 | 5379 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5380 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5381 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5382 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5383 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5384 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5385 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5386 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5387 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5388 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5389 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5390 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5391 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5392 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5393 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5394 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5395 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5396 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5397 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5398 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5399 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5400 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5401 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5402 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5403 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5404 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5405 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5406 |
314 | 5407 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5408 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5409 { |
25012 | 5410 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5411 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5412 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5413 return; | |
5414 } | |
5415 | |
764 | 5416 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5417 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5418 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5419 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5420 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5421 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5422 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5423 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5424 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5425 | |
5426 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5427 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5428 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5429 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5430 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5431 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5432 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5433 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5434 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5435 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5436 return; |
5437 | |
15078 | 5438 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5439 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5440 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5441 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5442 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5443 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5444 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5445 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5446 |
25012 | 5447 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5448 { |
25012 | 5449 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5450 { |
25012 | 5451 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5452 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5453 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5454 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5455 (newheight | |
5456 - 1 | |
5457 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5458 0); | |
5459 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5460 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5461 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5462 } |
5463 else | |
764 | 5464 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5465 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5466 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5467 | |
5468 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5469 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5470 } |
5471 | |
25012 | 5472 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5473 { |
25012 | 5474 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5475 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5476 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5477 | |
5478 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5479 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5480 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5481 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5482 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5483 } |
5484 | |
25012 | 5485 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5486 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5487 | |
5488 { | |
5489 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5490 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5491 | |
5492 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5493 &text_area_height); | |
5494 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5495 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5496 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5497 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5498 } | |
5499 | |
5500 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5501 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5502 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5503 |
5504 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5505 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5506 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5507 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5508 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5509 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5510 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5511 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5512 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5513 } |
25012 | 5514 |
5515 | |
314 | 5516 |
25012 | 5517 /*********************************************************************** |
5518 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5519 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5520 | |
5521 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5522 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5523 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5524 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5525 (file) | |
5526 Lisp_Object file; | |
5527 { | |
5528 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5529 termscript = 0; | |
5530 | |
5531 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5532 { | |
5533 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5534 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5535 if (termscript == 0) | |
5536 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5537 } | |
5538 return Qnil; | |
5539 } | |
5540 | |
5541 | |
314 | 5542 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5543 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5544 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5545 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5546 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5547 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5548 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5549 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5550 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5551 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5552 fflush (stdout); |
5553 if (termscript) | |
5554 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5555 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5556 termscript); |
314 | 5557 fflush (termscript); |
5558 } | |
5559 return Qnil; | |
5560 } | |
5561 | |
25012 | 5562 |
314 | 5563 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5564 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5565 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5566 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5567 (arg) | |
5568 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5569 { | |
493 | 5570 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5571 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5572 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5573 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5574 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5575 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5576 fflush (stdout); |
5577 } | |
5578 else | |
5579 bitch_at_user (); | |
5580 | |
5581 return Qnil; | |
5582 } | |
5583 | |
21514 | 5584 void |
314 | 5585 bitch_at_user () |
5586 { | |
5587 if (noninteractive) | |
5588 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5589 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5590 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5591 else | |
5592 ring_bell (); | |
5593 fflush (stdout); | |
5594 } | |
5595 | |
25012 | 5596 |
5597 | |
5598 /*********************************************************************** | |
5599 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5600 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5601 | |
314 | 5602 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5603 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5604 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5605 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5606 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5607 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5608 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5609 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5610 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5611 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5612 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5613 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5614 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5615 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5616 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5617 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5618 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5619 | |
5620 { | |
5621 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5622 sec = (int) duration; | |
5623 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5624 } | |
314 | 5625 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5626 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5627 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5628 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5629 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5630 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5631 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5632 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5633 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5634 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5635 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5636 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5637 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5638 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5639 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5640 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5641 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5642 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5643 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5644 return Qnil; |
5645 | |
650 | 5646 { |
5647 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5648 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5649 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5650 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5651 } | |
587 | 5652 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5653 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5654 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5655 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5656 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5657 immediate_quit = 1; |
5658 QUIT; | |
5659 | |
5660 #ifdef VMS | |
5661 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5662 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5663 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5664 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5665 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5666 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5667 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5668 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5669 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5670 |
314 | 5671 while (1) |
5672 { | |
554 | 5673 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5674 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5675 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5676 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5677 break; |
5678 } | |
5679 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5680 sleep (sec); | |
5681 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5682 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5683 | |
5684 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5685 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5686 | |
5687 return Qnil; | |
5688 } | |
5689 | |
25012 | 5690 |
650 | 5691 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5692 it does the redisplay. | |
5693 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5694 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5695 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5696 |
5697 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5698 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5699 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5700 { |
650 | 5701 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5702 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5703 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5704 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5705 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5706 return Qnil; |
650 | 5707 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5708 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5709 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5710 | |
673 | 5711 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5712 return Qt; | |
5713 | |
314 | 5714 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5715 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5716 #endif |
5717 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5718 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5719 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5720 | |
314 | 5721 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5722 } | |
5723 | |
25012 | 5724 |
650 | 5725 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5726 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5727 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5728 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5729 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5730 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5731 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5732 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5733 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5734 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5735 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5736 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5737 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5738 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5739 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5740 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5741 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5742 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5743 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5744 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5745 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5746 | |
5747 { | |
5748 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5749 sec = (int) duration; | |
5750 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5751 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5752 |
650 | 5753 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5754 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5755 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5756 #endif |
5757 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5758 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5759 } |
25012 | 5760 |
5761 | |
314 | 5762 |
25012 | 5763 /*********************************************************************** |
5764 Other Lisp Functions | |
5765 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5766 | |
5767 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5768 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5769 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5770 add length checks). */ | |
5771 | |
5772 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5773 | |
5774 | |
5775 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5776 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5777 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5778 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5779 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5780 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5781 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5782 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5783 the current state.\n") | |
5784 () | |
5785 { | |
5786 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5787 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5788 int n; | |
5789 | |
5790 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5791 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5792 { | |
5793 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5794 goto changed; | |
5795 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5796 goto changed; | |
5797 } | |
5798 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5799 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5800 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5801 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5802 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5803 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5804 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5805 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5806 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5807 continue; | |
5808 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5809 goto changed; | |
5810 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5811 goto changed; | |
5812 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5813 goto changed; | |
5814 } | |
5815 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5816 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5817 return Qnil; | |
5818 changed: | |
5819 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5820 n = 1; | |
5821 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5822 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5823 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5824 n += 3; |
5825 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5826 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5827 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5828 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5829 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5830 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5831 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5832 { | |
5833 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5834 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5835 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5836 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5837 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5838 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5839 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5840 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5841 continue; | |
5842 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5843 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5844 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5845 } | |
5846 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5847 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5848 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5849 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5850 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5851 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5852 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5853 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5854 abort (); | |
5855 return Qt; | |
5856 } | |
5857 | |
5858 | |
5859 | |
5860 /*********************************************************************** | |
5861 Initialization | |
5862 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5863 | |
314 | 5864 char *terminal_type; |
5865 | |
25012 | 5866 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5867 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5868 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5869 |
21514 | 5870 void |
314 | 5871 init_display () |
5872 { | |
5873 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5874 extern int display_arg; | |
5875 #endif | |
5876 | |
25012 | 5877 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5878 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5879 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5880 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5881 | |
314 | 5882 meta_key = 0; |
5883 inverse_video = 0; | |
5884 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
5885 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
5886 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5887 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5888 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5889 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 5890 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5891 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5892 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5893 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5894 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5895 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5896 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5897 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 5898 |
5899 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5900 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5901 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5902 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5903 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5904 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5905 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5906 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5907 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5908 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5909 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 5910 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5911 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5912 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5913 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5914 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5915 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5916 ) |
314 | 5917 { |
5918 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
5919 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
5920 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
5921 #else | |
5922 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
5923 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5924 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5925 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 5926 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5927 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5928 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5929 #endif |
25012 | 5930 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 5931 return; |
5932 } | |
5933 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
5934 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5935 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5936 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5937 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5938 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5939 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 5940 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5941 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5942 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5943 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5944 |
314 | 5945 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
5946 if (! isatty (0)) | |
5947 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5948 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 5949 exit (1); |
5950 } | |
5951 | |
5952 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
5953 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
5954 if (!terminal_type) | |
5955 { | |
5956 #ifdef VMS | |
5957 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
5958 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
5959 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
5960 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
5961 #else | |
5962 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
5963 #endif | |
5964 exit (1); | |
5965 } | |
5966 | |
5967 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 5968 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 5969 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
5970 { | |
5971 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
5972 char *p; | |
5973 | |
5974 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
5975 | |
5976 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
5977 if (isupper (*p)) | |
5978 *p = tolower (*p); | |
5979 | |
5980 terminal_type = new; | |
5981 } | |
25012 | 5982 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 5983 |
5984 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 5985 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5986 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5987 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5988 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5989 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5990 |
25012 | 5991 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
5992 | |
5993 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
5994 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
5995 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5996 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5997 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5998 |
25012 | 5999 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6000 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 6001 |
6002 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
6003 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6004 if (initialized) | |
6005 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
6006 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
6007 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 6008 |
6009 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
6010 if (initialized | |
6011 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6012 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6013 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6014 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6015 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6016 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6017 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6018 #endif |
25012 | 6019 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6020 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6021 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6022 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6023 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6024 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6025 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6026 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6027 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6028 } |
314 | 6029 } |
25012 | 6030 |
6031 | |
314 | 6032 |
25012 | 6033 /*********************************************************************** |
6034 Blinking cursor | |
6035 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6036 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6037 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6038 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6039 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6040 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6041 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6042 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6043 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6044 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6045 { |
6046 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6047 output routines. */ | |
6048 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6049 { | |
6050 if (NILP (window)) | |
6051 window = selected_window; | |
6052 else | |
6053 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6054 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6055 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6056 } |
6057 | |
6058 return Qnil; | |
6059 } | |
6060 | |
6061 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6062 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6063 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6064 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6065 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6066 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6067 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6068 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6069 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6070 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6071 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6072 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6073 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6074 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6075 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6076 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6077 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6078 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6079 |
25012 | 6080 |
6081 /*********************************************************************** | |
6082 Initialization | |
6083 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6084 | |
21514 | 6085 void |
314 | 6086 syms_of_display () |
6087 { | |
764 | 6088 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6089 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6090 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6091 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6092 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6093 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6094 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6095 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6096 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6097 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6098 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6099 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6100 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6101 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6102 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6103 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6104 |
314 | 6105 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6106 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6107 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6108 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6109 |
314 | 6110 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6111 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6112 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6113 |
314 | 6114 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6115 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6116 |
314 | 6117 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6118 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6119 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6120 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6121 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6122 |
314 | 6123 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6124 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6125 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6126 |
314 | 6127 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6128 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6129 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6130 |
314 | 6131 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6132 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6133 |
314 | 6134 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6135 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6136 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6137 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6138 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6139 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6140 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6141 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6142 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6143 | |
6144 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6145 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6146 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6147 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6148 | |
25012 | 6149 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6150 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6151 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6152 | |
314 | 6153 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6154 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6155 if (noninteractive) | |
6156 #endif | |
6157 { | |
6158 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6159 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6160 } | |
6161 } |